Samsung | HT-X710 | دليل المستخدم | Samsung HT-X710 User manual

‫‪HT-X710‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺻﻮّﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﻜﺮﺍ ﻟﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍء ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪www.samsung.com/global/register‬‬
‫‪4/25/2008 9:16:25 PM‬‬
‫‪HT-X710_NO EUR(ARA)_0422.indd *1‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ‪CD، WMA-CD,-DVD-AUDIO، DVD-VIDEO، CD, MP٣‬‬
‫‪ ،DivX، CD-R/RW‬ﻭ‪.DVD±R/RW‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪DVD-Audio‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ .DVD-Audio‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ١٩٢kHz DAC/bit-٢٤‬ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻋﻢ ‪USB Host‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ‪ ،MP٣‬ﻭﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪USB HOST‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰء ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻠﻴﺤﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺺ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ »ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺮﺓ« ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ HT-X710‬ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ‪ HT-X710‬ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻚ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ‪ :‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺸﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻮﻉ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ‪ HT-X710‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ JPEG، DVD‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺩﻳﻮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺄﺧﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺄﺟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪n (HDMI-CEC) +Anynet‬‬
‫‪ + Anynet‬ﻫﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) .HDMI‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪(.+ Anynet‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻻ ﺗﺎﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫• ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺷﺎﺵ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫√) "‪".“UNπ∞« vK´ ¸uM∑L∞« lLA∞« q∏± VNK∞« ¸bB± lC¢ ô‬‬
‫») "‪".“UNπ∞« vK´ W¥d≥e∞« q∏± qzUº∞U° UµK∑L± UµO® lC¢ ôË tOK´ g®d¢ ô Ë√ “UNπ∞« dDI¢ ô‬‬
‫‪[jI≠ W¥œuFº∞« WO°dF∞« ‹UßUOI∞« WLE‬‬
‫]‪Ò M±‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺑﻊ‬
‫≥‪WO°dF∞« ‹UßUOI∞« WLEÒM± ‚ÒbB¢ jK≠ 127 f°UÆ vK´ Êu°e∞« qB∫¥ Ê√ sJLL∞« s± .tOK´ W¥œuFº∞« WO°dF∞« ‹UßUOI∞« WLEÒM± ‚ÒbB¢ jK≠ 220 f°UÆ l± VßUM± “UNπ∞« «c‬‬
‫§‪WO°dF∞« ‹UßUOI∞« WLEÒM± ‚ÒbB¢ jK≠ 127 f°UÆ vK´ Êu°e∞« qB∫¥ Ê√ sJLL∞« s± .tOK´ W¥œuFº∞« WO°dF∞« ‹UßUOI∞« WLEÒM± ‚ÒbB¢.jU≤KU≠π2± 2w0K∫L∞« d‬‬
‫‪WOU°∑d∞F« ∞s« ±‹tUOßK´UOWI¥∞œ« uWFLº‬‬
‫‪EÒM∞±« ‚ÒbB¢ jK≠ 127 f°UÆ vK´ Êu°e∞« qB∫¥ Ê√ sJLL∞« s± .tOK´ W¥œuFº∞« WO°dF∞« ‹UßUOI∞« WLEÒM± ‚ÒbB¢ jK≠ 220‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫«∞‪.U≤Uπ± wK∫L∞« d§U∑∞« s± tOK´ W¥œuFº‬‬
‫«∞‪.U≤Uπ± wK∫L∞« d§U∑∞« s± tOK´ W¥œuFº‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪4/25/2008 9:16:37 PM‬‬
‫ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫)ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ )ﺣﺠﻢ ‪(AAA‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻓﺤﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪HT-X710_NO EUR(ARA)_0422.indd 2-3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻃﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻃﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻻﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ Video Out‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺩﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻚ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺸﻐّﻠﻚ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ )ﺃﺛﺎﺙ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻟﻪ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ )‪ ١٠ ~ ٧٫٥‬ﺳﻢ(‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻐﻄﺎﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺛﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻀﺨﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻔﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﻪ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺨﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﻭﺳﻮء ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻮﺍﺻﻒ ﺭﻋﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻀﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﺫﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺮﻣﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﺮﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺨﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ )ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﻰ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﻄﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ (...‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻮء ﺍﻷﺩﺍء‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻻﻏﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻞ ﻻﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻻﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﻜﺜﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﻐّﻠﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺘﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪4/25/2008 9:16:38 PM‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪MP3/WMA-CD‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪DivX‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪USB Host‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪HT-X710_NO EUR(ARA)_0422.indd 4-5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻱ )ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮ(‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪) DRC‬ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻲ(‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﻳﻮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻭﺩﻳﻮ ‪) HDMI‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫‪٤٨‬‬
‫‪٤٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻳﺤﺔ‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬
‫‪٥١‬‬
‫‪٥١‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪) V-SOUND‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺠﺴﻢ(‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪) S.VOL‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺿﺨﻢ(‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﻬﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬
‫‪٥٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ‪USB Flash‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪MP3‬‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻃﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻧﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫‪٤٨‬‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻳﻘﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻘﻮﻥ‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DVD-R/DVD-RW‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﻐﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪CD‬‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )‪ CD-R‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(CD-RW‬‬
‫‪MP3‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ ،CD-R/-RW‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ ،CD-R/-RW‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ DVD-R/RW، CD-R) MPEG٤‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(CD-RW‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ "‪) DVD‬‬
‫(" ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD-VIDEO، DVD-AUDIO‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ DVD-R/-RW‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﻐﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺬﻛﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ DVD‬ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD-R/-RW‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ‪ ،DVD Video‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‬
‫‪٥٢‬‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪USB HOST‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪4/25/2008 9:16:40 PM‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ (١‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪) .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣~٤‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‪) .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪(٥٢~٥٣‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‬
‫‪©Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd 2008‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺏ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‬
‫ﻟﻼﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪HT-X710_NO EUR(ARA)_0422.indd 6-7‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻵﻣﻨﺔ )‪.(DRM‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻄﻰ ‪) DVD‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯﺓ ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺩﻭﻟﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﻭﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .MPEG-2‬ﺍﻵﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺮﺡ ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﻔﻠﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻔّﺮ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐّﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﻊ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﺳﻴﺸﻐّﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﺼﻖ ﺭﻗﻌﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺴﻌﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫‪DVD-AUDIO‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺩﻳﻮ‪+‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪DVD-VIDEO‬‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫‪AUDIO-CD‬‬
‫‪COMPACT‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫‪DIGITAL AUDIO‬‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺩﻳﻮ‪+‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ(‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٤٨٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺎﻥ(‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٨٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ(‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ١٦٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺎﻥ(‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫‪ ٧٤‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫—‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫—‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ !‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ CD-G، CD-I، CD-ROM، DVD-ROM‬ﻭ‪ DVD-RAM‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫>‪ <WRONG DISC FORMAT‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﺮﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ >‪<CAN’T PLAY THIS DISC PELASE, CHECK REGION CODE‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫❖ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪CD-R‬‬
‫• ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ )ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻮﻣﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ( ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪.CD-R‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ CD-R‬ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ٦٥٠‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎﺑﻴﺖ‪ ٧٤/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) CD-R media‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ( ﻷﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) CD-RW media‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ( ﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ CD-R‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ »ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ« ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺎ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻇﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫❖ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪CD-R MP3‬‬
‫● ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪~ 6‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻮﺍﺹ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ CD-R‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ‪ ٩٦٦٠ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Joliet‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ ٨ MP3‬ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﺗﺤﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ )‪.(+ = / .‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪/‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪.Kbps ١٢٨‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ "‪ "mp٣.‬ﻭ"‪ "MP٣.‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺟﺰء ﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺟﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﻍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ )‪ ،(VBR : Variable Bit Rate‬ﻣﺜﻼ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬
‫)ﻣﺜﻼ‪ ،(Kbps ٣٢٠ ~ ٣٢ Kbps ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬
‫❖ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪CD-R JPEG‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ "‪."jpeg.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ CD-R‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ‪ ٩٦٦٠ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Joliet‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ ٨ JPEG‬ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ )‪.(+ = / .‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺟﺰء ﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﻍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪٩٫٩٩٩‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺄﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻟـ ‪ ،Kodak/Fuji Picture‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ‪ Kodak/Fuji Picture‬ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫❖ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD-R/RW، CD-R/RW‬ﻭ‪DivX‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ DivX‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻷﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ .DivX Networks, Inc‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ ،QPEL، GMC :‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٦٠٠ × ٨٠٠‬ﻓﻴﻜﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ(‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.DivX‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻣﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ ،.DivX Networks, Inc‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ "‪."www.divxnetworks.net‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫• ﺗﺸﻔّﺮ ﻛﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ .‬ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﻠﻚ ‪ Macrovision Corporation‬ﻭﻣﺎﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ ،Macrovision Corporation‬ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﻭﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ‪ Macrovision Corporation‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪4/25/2008 9:16:41 PM‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪HT-X710_NO EUR(ARA)_0422.indd 8-9‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٢ ٣ ٤ ٥‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٢ ٣ ٤ ٥ ٦‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ) (‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ )‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ) (‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ) (‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ )¦(‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪4/25/2008 9:16:41 PM‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪AUX IN 2‬‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻷﻧﺎﻟﻮﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ )‪ (VIDEO IN‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ Ω ٧٥‬ﻣﺘﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ‪.FM‬‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪.FM‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ١٠‬ﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪) HDMI‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪١ AUX IN‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪HT-X710_NO EUR(ARA)_0422.indd 10-11‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) EJECT‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ(‬
‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ )‪(9 ~ 0‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺍﻟﻔﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻢ‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺍﻟﻒ‪) SD ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‪) HD/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) V-SOUND‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ(‪،‬‬
‫‪) V-H/P‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪AUDIO UPSCALE/P.BASS‬‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪/‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﻬﻴﺮ(‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﻡ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪/‬ﺗﺨﻄﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺍﻟﻒ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫● ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) S.VOL‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺿﺨﻢ(‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪4/25/2008 9:16:50 PM‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻧﺰﻻﻗﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ ،١٫٥V AAA‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﺤﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﺒﻴﻦ )‪ +‬ﻭ–(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﺪﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻳﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ ‪ (+) :‬ﻣﻊ )‪ (+‬ﻭ)‪ (-‬ﻣﻊ )‪.(-‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻣﺘﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪HT-X710_NO EUR(ARA)_0422.indd 12-13‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ ‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﻚ ﺯﺭ ‪) POWER‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ ١٧ ،١٦ ،١٥ ،٠٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪.٤٠‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺇﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪) TV POWER‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ(‪) VOLUME ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‪) CHANNEL ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ )‪.(٩ ~ ٠‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻊ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺑﺤﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٢٣‬ﻗﺪﻣﺎ )‪ ٧‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ( ﺑﺨﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪4/25/2008 9:16:52 PM‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫)‪Admiral (M.Wards‬‬
‫‪56, 57, 58‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪A Mark‬‬
‫‪01, 15‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪Anam‬‬
‫‪01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11,‬‬
‫‪46‬‬
‫‪12, 13, 14‬‬
‫‪47‬‬
‫‪44‬‬
‫‪MTC‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫‪NEC‬‬
‫‪18, 19, 20, 40, 59, 60‬‬
‫‪Nikei‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪Onking‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪AOC‬‬
‫‪01, 18, 40, 48‬‬
‫‪48‬‬
‫‪Onwa‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫)‪Bell & Howell (M.Wards‬‬
‫‪57, 58, 81‬‬
‫‪49‬‬
‫‪Panasonic‬‬
‫‪06, 07, 08, 09, 54, 66, 67, 73, 74‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪Brocsonic‬‬
‫‪59, 60‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪Penney‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪Candle‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫‪51‬‬
‫‪Philco‬‬
‫‪03, 15, 17, 18, 48, 54, 59, 62, 69, 90‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪Cetronic‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪52‬‬
‫‪Philips‬‬
‫‪15, 17, 18, 40, 48, 54, 62, 72‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪Citizen‬‬
‫‪03, 18, 25‬‬
‫‪53‬‬
‫‪Pioneer‬‬
‫‪63, 66, 80, 91‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪Theater‬‬
‫‪97‬‬
‫‪54‬‬
‫‪Portland‬‬
‫‪15, 18, 59‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪Classic‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫‪Proton‬‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪Concerto‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫‪56‬‬
‫‪Quasar‬‬
‫‪06, 66, 67‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫‪Contec‬‬
‫‪46‬‬
‫‪57‬‬
‫‪Radio Shack‬‬
‫‪17, 48, 56, 60, 61, 75‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫‪Coronado‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪58‬‬
‫‪RCA/Proscan‬‬
‫‪18, 59, 67, 76, 77, 78, 92, 93, 94‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪Craig‬‬
‫‪03, 05, 61, 82, 83, 84‬‬
‫‪59‬‬
‫‪Realistic‬‬
‫‪03, 19‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫‪Croslex‬‬
‫‪62‬‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫‪Sampo‬‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫‪Samsung‬‬
‫‪00, 15, 16, 17, 40, 43, 46, 47, 48, 49,‬‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫‪Crown‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫‪Curtis Mates‬‬
‫‪59, 61, 63‬‬
‫● ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) TV‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ( ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) POWER‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺴﻚ ﺯﺭ ‪) POWER‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻛﻮﺩ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪59, 60, 98‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫‪CXC‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪62‬‬
‫‪Sanyo‬‬
‫‪19, 61, 65‬‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫‪Daewoo‬‬
‫‪02, 03, 04, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24,‬‬
‫‪63‬‬
‫‪Scott‬‬
‫‪03, 40, 60, 61‬‬
‫‪25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 32, 34, 35, 36, 48, 59, 90‬‬
‫‪64‬‬
‫‪Sears‬‬
‫‪15, 18, 19‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫‪Daytron‬‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫‪65‬‬
‫‪Sharp‬‬
‫‪15, 57, 64‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫‪Dynasty‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪Signature 2000 (M.Wards) 66‬‬
‫‪57, 58‬‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫‪Emerson‬‬
‫‪03, 15, 40, 46, 59, 61, 64, 82, 83, 84, 85‬‬
‫‪67‬‬
‫‪Sony‬‬
‫‪50, 51, 52, 53, 55‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫‪Fisher‬‬
‫‪19, 65‬‬
‫‪68‬‬
‫‪Soundesign‬‬
‫‪03, 40‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫‪Funai‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪69‬‬
‫‪Spectricon‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪Futuretech‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪70‬‬
‫‪SSS‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫)‪General Electric (GE‬‬
‫‪06, 40, 56, 59, 66, 67, 68‬‬
‫‪71‬‬
‫‪Sylvania‬‬
‫‪18, 40, 48, 54, 59, 60, 62‬‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫‪Hall Mark‬‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫‪72‬‬
‫‪Symphonic‬‬
‫‪61, 95, 96‬‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫‪Hitachi‬‬
‫‪15, 18, 50, 59, 69‬‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫‪Tatung‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫‪Inkel‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫‪74‬‬
‫‪Techwood‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫‪JC Penny‬‬
‫‪56, 59, 67, 86‬‬
‫‪75‬‬
‫‪Teknika‬‬
‫‪03, 15, 18, 25‬‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫‪JVC‬‬
‫‪70‬‬
‫‪76‬‬
‫‪TMK‬‬
‫‪18, 40‬‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫‪KTV‬‬
‫‪59, 61, 87, 88‬‬
‫‪77‬‬
‫‪Toshiba‬‬
‫‪19, 57, 63, 71‬‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫‪KEC‬‬
‫‪03, 15, 40‬‬
‫‪78‬‬
‫‪Vidtech‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫‪KMC‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪79‬‬
‫‪Videch‬‬
‫‪59, 60, 69‬‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫)‪LG (Goldstar‬‬
‫‪01, 15, 16, 17, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44‬‬
‫‪80‬‬
‫‪Wards‬‬
‫‪15, 17, 18, 40, 48, 54, 60, 64‬‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫‪38‬‬
‫‪Luxman‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫‪81‬‬
‫‪Yamaha‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫)‪LXI (Sears‬‬
‫‪19, 54, 56, 59, 60, 62, 63, 65, 71‬‬
‫‪82‬‬
‫‪York‬‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫‪39‬‬
‫‪Magnavox‬‬
‫‪15, 17, 18, 48, 54, 59, 60, 62, 72, 89‬‬
‫‪83‬‬
‫‪Yupiteru‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫‪Marantz‬‬
‫‪40, 54‬‬
‫‪84‬‬
‫‪Zenith‬‬
‫‪58, 79‬‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫‪Matsui‬‬
‫‪54‬‬
‫‪85‬‬
‫‪Zonda‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪42‬‬
‫‪MGA‬‬
‫‪18, 40‬‬
‫‪86‬‬
‫‪Dongyang‬‬
‫‪03, 54‬‬
‫‪43‬‬
‫‪Mitsubishi/MGA‬‬
‫‪18, 40, 59, 60, 75‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪HT-X710_NO EUR(ARA)_0422.indd 14-15‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺪﺍﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ )‪ (-‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ )‪ ،(-‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺪﺍﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺻﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪SW‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪ ٢٫٥‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ )ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ )ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ(‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺑﺤﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٢٫٥‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ٢٫٤ ~ ٢ "٣٢‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ٤ ~ ٣٫٥ "٥٥‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ‪ei‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺎﻋﻚ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ )ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٤٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﺫﻧﻴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺗّﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻌﻪ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻻﻋﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺮﺡ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺳﻘﻄﺖ ﻣﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪g‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ )‪ (-/+‬ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﺿﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺿﻊ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻟﻜﻴﻼ ﻳﻤﻠﺴﻪ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺎﺩﻳﻬﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﺒﻮﺏ‬
‫)ﺛﻘﺐ( ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻷﻧﺒﻮﺏ )ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ(‪.‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪4/25/2008 9:16:53 PM‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻌﺖ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﻄﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪HT-X710_NO EUR(ARA)_0422.indd 16-17‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﺸﻒ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻵﻟﻲ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) HDMI‬ﺑﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﻫﯽ ﺑﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻳﻨﻘﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻟـ ‪ DVD‬ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺸﻐّﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ VIDEO OUT‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪z.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ‪ HDMI‬؟‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻧﺎﻟﻮﺟﻲ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻧﺎﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،BD/DVD‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻧﺎﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ )ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺑﻠﻮ – ﺭﺍﻱ( ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻧﺎﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ(‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﻔﺾ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﻭﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯﺓ ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻧﺎﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫• ﻭﺻﻒ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ – HDMI‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﺼﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ‪) HDCP‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ‪ HDCP‬؟‬
‫‪) HDCP‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ( ﻫﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪ BD/DVD‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﻭﺟﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪ ،PC، DVD‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺳﻘﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪١‬‬
‫• ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ‪ Anynet+‬؟‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.Anynet+‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﺰﻓﻮﻳﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.Anynet+‬‬
‫ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ‬‫ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.HDMI‬‬‫ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻭﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﺯﺭ ‪) Play‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.HDMI‬‬‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪٣‬‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ(‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪) HDMI : ١‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ( ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI IN‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪ : ٢‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﺟﻬﺰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﺑﻤﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ( ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ )‪ Pr، Pb‬ﻭ‪ (Y‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪ : ٣‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ VIDEO OUT‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ VIDEO IN‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻲ ‪.(٤٨٠i) ٥٧٦i‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ Samsung‬ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ SAMSUNG‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫)‪.Anynet+(HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪4/25/2008 9:16:56 PM‬‬
‫)ﺍﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﺪ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.(Anynet+‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪HT-X710_NO EUR(ARA)_0422.indd 18-19‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺩﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪ : ١‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻧﺎﻟﻮﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪ /‬ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) HDMI‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬
‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺯﺭ ‪) SD/HD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﺨﺮﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻫﻲ‪،٧٢٠p ،(٤٨٠p) ٥٧٦p‬‬
‫‪.١٠٨٠p/١٠٨٠i‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ‪) SD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﻫﻲ ‪ (٤٨٠p) ٥٧٦p‬ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫‪) HD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ( ﻫﻲ ‪.١٠٨٠p/١٠٨i ،٧٢٠p‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻫﻲ ‪.(٤٨٠p) ٥٧٦p‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺨﺮﺝ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺯﺭ ‪) SD/HD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) HDMI‬ﺑﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ( ؟‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﻨﻘﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟـ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻧﺎﻟﻮﺝ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺘﻊ‬
‫ﺑﺄﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻻ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻌﻲ‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ)‪Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫‪ +Anynet‬ﻫﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ Anynet+ .‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﺝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ .HDMI‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.Anynet+‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪) .HDMI‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٨‬‬
‫‪Audio OUT‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ‪) .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ T، S ،‬ﻭ ‪( ، ,W,X‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫)ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ‪ :‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪،‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺻﻞ ‪) AUX IN١‬ﺍﻷﻭﺩﻳﻮ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ Audio Out‬ﻟﻠﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻧﺎﻟﻮﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪ /‬ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪.MP3‬‬
‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ )‪ Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ‪ On‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Receiver : On‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Receiver : Off‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) AUX‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺧﻞ ‪.AUX١‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪) FUNCTION‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‬
‫‪.DVD/CD ➞ DIGITAL IN ➞ AUX 1 ➞ AUX 2 ➞ USB ➞ BT AUDIO ➞ TUNER‬‬
‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ THEATER to connector‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : View TV‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ )‪ Anynet+(HDMI CEC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻣﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪MOVE ENTER‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫• ‪ : THEATER Menu‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ‬
‫• ‪ : THEATER Operation‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Receiver : On‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Receiver : Off‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪4/25/2008 9:17:01 PM‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪HT-X710_NO EUR(ARA)_0422.indd 20-21‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪FM‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺻﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪ FM‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ‪.FM 75 Ω COAXIAL‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺒﻂء ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﻦ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺛﺒّﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪ : 2‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪) FM‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ(‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻌﻲ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ(‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻯ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻧﺎﻟﻮﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺳﻤﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪ ،Audio Out‬ﺻﻠﻪ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻧﺎﻟﻮﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺚ ‪.AM‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪ : ٢‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻧﺎﻟﻮﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻧﺎﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪) VCR‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺻﻞ ‪) AUX IN 2‬ﺍﻷﻭﺩﻳﻮ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ Audio Out‬ﻟﻠﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻧﺎﻟﻮﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) AUX‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺧﻞ ‪.AUX2‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) FUNCTION‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‬
‫‪.DVD/CD ➞ DIGITAL IN ➞ AUX 1 ➞ AUX 2 ➞ USB ➞ BT AUDIO ➞ TUNER‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺨﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻳﺴﻔﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺠﺐ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺣﺠﺐ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺮﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪ Video Output‬ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪ Audio Output‬ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ )‪ : Set-Top Box‬ﺳﻴﺖ – ﺗﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻛﺲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺻﻞ ‪) Digital Input‬ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ Digital Output‬ﻟﻠﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) AUX‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.DIGITAL IN‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪) FUNCTION‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‬
‫‪.DVD/CD ➞ DIGITAL IN ➞ AUX 1 ➞ AUX 2 ➞ USB ➞ BT AUDIO ➞ TUNER‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪4/25/2008 9:17:04 PM‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪HT-X710_NO EUR(ARA)_0422.indd 22-23‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺻﻞ ﺣﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ..١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺿﻊ ﻗﺮﺻﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) PLAY‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )‬
‫• ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) DVD RECEIVER‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ‪ (DVD‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺮﺡ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) FUNCTION‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.DVD/CD‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) STOP‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ( )‪ (‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) TV‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ( ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) POWER‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ﻣﻨﺄﺟﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪) PRESS PLAY‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪) PLAY‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ) ( ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ‪) ENTER‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﺄﻧﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪) .‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪) STOP‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) PLAY‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫(‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ TV/VIDEO‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) PAUSE‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ( ) ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) PLAY‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ ٧‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫‪4/25/2008 9:17:09 PM‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ "‪."PAL‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "NTSC‬ﺃﻭ "‪ "PAL‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪٧‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ "‪ "NTSC‬ﻭ"‪."PAL‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻠﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫( )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻮﺝ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺯﺭ ‪ $‬ﺃﻭ ‪) #‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺻﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ) ‪ : CSS (Content Scrambling System‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫‪HT-X710_NO EUR(ARA)_0422.indd 24-25‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ JPEG‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻣﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪MP3/WMA-CD‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻻﻧﻘﻼﺏ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )‪ (CD-R، CD-RW‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ‪.MP3/WMA‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪S,T,W,X‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪.MP3/WMA‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ MP3/WMA‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪.MP3/WMA‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.WMA-DRM‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪ S,T,W,X‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﻦ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) ENTER‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪S,T‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪..‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪ S,T,W,X‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) ENTER‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) STOP‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ( )‪ (‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ :‬ﻳﺪﻭﺭ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻌﺎﻛﺲ ﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ :‬ﻳﺪﻭﺭ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫‪ ٩٠‬ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪.MP3/WMA-CD‬‬
‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ‪ MP3‬ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ‪ MP3WMA‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻠﺐ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻠﺐ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻫﻲ ‪) ٣٤٨٠ × ٥١٢٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (MPixel 19.0‬ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭ‪) ١٥٣٦ × ٢٠٤٨‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (MPixel 3.0‬ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ JPEG‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻟﺨﺮﺝ ‪ ،١٠٨٠p/١٠٨٠i/٧٢٠p HDMI‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪٥٧٦p‬‬
‫)‪ (٤٨٠p‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻘﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪S,T,W,X‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻻﻳﻘﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻘﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻳﻘﻮﻥ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻘﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻳﻘﻮﻥ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻘﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻳﻘﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻘﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻳﻘﻮﻥ‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪4/25/2008 9:17:11 PM‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪HT-X710_NO EUR(ARA)_0422.indd 26-27‬‬
‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﺪ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﺪ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪DIVX‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﻭﻟﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DivX‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪ ..١‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ S,T‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ ) ( ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪) ENTER‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ DivX‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻣﻜﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪. .‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.# ،$‬‬
‫• ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‪ ، #‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ، $‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪ : DivX )Digital internet video eXpress‬ﺍﻛﺴﺒﺮﺱ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪ DivX‬ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﺘﻪ ‪ Microsoft‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .MPEG4‬ﻳﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻧﺘﺮﻧﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ MPEG4‬ﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ MP3‬ﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺩﻳﻮ ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺃﻭﺩﻳﻮ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.# ،$‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫‪.2x ➞ 4x ➞ 8x ➞ 32x ➞ Normal‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻣﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻮﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻣﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪.W،X‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﺨﻄﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪. X‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﺨﻄﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪.W‬‬
‫‪Audio Display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻭﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) AUDIO‬ﺍﻷﻭﺩﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) SUBTITLE‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﺑﻴﻦ)‪SUBTITLE (1/N, 2/N ...‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪.OFF SUBTITLE‬‬
‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪) ٢‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ( ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪.DivX‬‬
‫‪4/25/2008 9:17:14 PM‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ‬
‫‪MP٣‬‬
‫‪WMA‬‬
‫‪AC٣‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٣٨٤kbps~٨٠‬‬
‫‪١٢٨kbps~٥٦‬‬
‫‪٣٨٤kbps~١٢٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫‪٤٤٫١khz‬‬
‫‪٤٨khz/٤٤٫١‬‬
‫• ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ‪ :‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ‪ DivX‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﻲ ‪ ٤٨٠*٦٤٠‬ﻓﻴﻜﺴﻞ)‪ ،(٤:٣‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻮﺝ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٦٠٠*٨٠٠‬ﻓﻴﻤﺴﻞ )‪ .(١٦:٩‬ﻟﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪.٨٠٠‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺸﻐّﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ khz ٤٨‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،kbps ٣٢٠‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻡ‬
‫‪XviD ,DivX٥٫١~DivX٣٫١١‬‬
‫‪V٧/V٣/V٢/V١‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻣﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﺑﻴﻦ )‪.AUDIO (1/N, 2/N....‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ‬
‫‪AVI‬‬
‫‪WMV‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻥ ّ‬
‫• ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )*‪ (smi.‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ) ‪ DivX (*.avi‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠّﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Samsung _007CD1.avi‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺃﺻﻞ‬
‫‪Samsung _007CD1.smi‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺣﺮﻑ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺄﻭ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺣﺮﻑ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﺳﻴﺎﻭﻱ )‪ ٢‬ﺑﻴﺖ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﻮﺭﻱ ﻭﺻﻴﻨﻲ( ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ®‪ DivX‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﻲ ﻳﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺸﻐّﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ®‪) DivX‬ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ (DivX®6‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﻂ ®‪ DivX‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫‪HT-X710_NO EUR(ARA)_0422.indd 28-29‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‪. ,‬‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪BAD‬‬
‫‪2X ➞ 4X ➞  8X ➞  32X ➞ X PLAY‬‬
‫‪BAGD‬‬
‫‪2X ➞  4X ➞  8X ➞  32X ➞ XPLAY‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) INFO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،DOLBY DIGITAL‬ﺃﻭ ‪PRO LOGIC‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ !‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ – ‪ ،MP3‬ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ×‪ ٢‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ×‪،٨× ،٤‬‬
‫ﻭ×‪.٣٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء‬
‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) SLOW‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫➞ ‪1/2 ➞ 1/4 ➞ 1/8 ➞ 1/2 ➞ 1/4 ➞ 1/8‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬
‫‪BA‬‬
‫‪Press the REMAIN button‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) REMAIN‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫➞‪1/8➞ 1/4➞ 1/2‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) REMAIN‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻰ(‬
‫‪DVD-VIDEO‬‬
‫‪TITLE ELAPSED ➞ TITLE REMAIN ➞ CHAPTER ELAPSED ➞ CHAPTER REMAIN‬‬
‫‪DVD-AUDIO‬‬
‫‪GROUP ELAPSED ➞ GROUP REMAIN ➞ TRACK ELAPSED ➞ TRACK REMAIN‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪TRACK REMAIN ➞ TRACK ELAPSED A‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.#,$‬‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪TRACK ELAPSED ➞ TRACK REMAIN ➞ TOTAL ELAPSED ➞ TOTAL REMAIN‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪4/25/2008 9:17:16 PM‬‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫‪HT-X710_NO EUR(ARA)_0422.indd 30-31‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻪ – ﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪BAGD‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺎﺭ )ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ )ﻣﻠﻒ ‪(MP3‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺴﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) INFO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ( ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪ X‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪REPEAT PLAYBACK‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ) ( ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) REPEAT‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ S,T‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ -A‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪) ENTER‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) ENTER‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) ENTER‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ( ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-VIDEO‬‬
‫‪REPEAT : CHAPTER ➞ REPEAT : TITLE ➞ REPEAT : OFF‬‬
‫‪DVD-AUDIO‬‬
‫‪REPEAT : TRACK ➞ REPEAT : GROUP ➞ REPEAT : OFF‬‬
‫‪CD‬‬
‫‪AGD‬‬
‫‪A-B‬‬
‫‪ d‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ S,T‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪REPEAT : TRACK ➞ REPEAT : DISC ➞ REPEAT : OFF‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪REPEAT : OFF➞REPEAT : RANDOM ➞ REPEAT : TRACK ➞ REPEAT : DIR‬‬
‫‪➞ REPEAT : DISC ➞ REPEAT : OFF‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫‪) CHAPTER‬ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ( ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) TITLE‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ( ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) GROUP‬ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﺔ( ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪) RANDOM‬ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ( ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪) .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫‪) TRACK‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ( ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) DIR‬ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ( ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) DISC‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ( ‪ :‬ﻳﺸﻐّﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻛﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) OFF‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫)ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ A-B REPEAT‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DivX، MP3‬ﺃﻭ ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) STEP‬ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) INFO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ( ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪ X‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪REPEAT PLAYBACK‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ) ( ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ T‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Repeat Playback‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) ENTER‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪OFF ➞ A- ➞ CHAP ➞ TITLE ➞ OFF‬‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫‪4/25/2008 9:17:19 PM‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪OFF ➞ A- ➞ TRACK ➞ DISC ➞ OFF‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DivX، MP3‬ﻭ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫‪HT-X710_NO EUR(ARA)_0422.indd 32-33‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD-Audio‬ﺗﻤﻠﻚ ﺟﻤﺎﻋﺔ »ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ« ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺗﻄﻠﺐ ‪ – ٤‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﺪﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪DVD-AUDIO‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD-Audio‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) INFO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪S,T‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫‪1/3‬‬
‫➞‪3/3‬‬
‫➞‪2/3‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﺟﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﺯﺭ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫➞ ‪1/3‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﺔ‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ X‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪) ANGLE‬ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ( )‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-AUDIO‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) ,,.‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺍﻟﻔﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD-Audio‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ )ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) ZOOM‬ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ S,T,W,X‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) ENTER‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) INFO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ( ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ZOOM X 1.5 ➞ZOOM X 2 ➞ZOOM X 3 ➞ZOOM OFF‬‬
‫‪SELECT ZOOM POSITION‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ S,T‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻧﺠﻴﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ( ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪EN 1/3 ➞ SP 2/3 ➞ FR 3/3 ➞ EN 1/3‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫‪4/25/2008 9:17:22 PM‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪) AUDIO‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٥‬‬
‫‪HT-X710_NO EUR(ARA)_0422.indd 34-35‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪) profile ،‬ﺑﺮﻭﻓﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻗﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) INFO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ( ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ T‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪ S,T,W,X‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) ENTER‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪EN 01/03 ➞ SP 02/03 ➞ FR 03/03 ➞ OFF/03 ➞EN 01/03‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪) SUBTITLE‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ d‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) EXIT‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ( ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪BAG‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ S,T‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪Disc Menu‬‬
‫)ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ( ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) ENTER‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "‪This‬‬
‫‪) "menu is not supported‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ X‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪) SUBTITLE‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ(‬
‫) (‪.‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) INFO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ( ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ S,T‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫) ( ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) ENTER‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ( ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ W,X‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ )‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ S,T‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) ENTER‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ W,X‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪) ENTER‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﺑﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ S,T‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪) Title Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) ENTER‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ d‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) EXIT‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ( ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪. .‬‬
‫‪AG‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪S,T‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) STOP‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ( )‪ (‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪. S,T‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫‪4/25/2008 9:17:25 PM‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ #,$‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫‪HT-X710_NO EUR(ARA)_0422.indd 36-37‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ "‪ "DISCONNECT‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺃﻭ ﻋﻄﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻤﺲ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻥ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻥ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﺍﻳﻒ ﻭﻻﻥ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻮﺃ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ SBC‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٢٣٧‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ٤٨/‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ SBC‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ )‪ ٣٢٨‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ٤٤٫١/‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻓﻌّﺎﻝ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺭﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﺍﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) FUNCTION‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪."BT AUDIO‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫‪.DVD/CD ➞ DIGITAL IN ➞ AUX 1 ➞ AUX 2 ➞ USB ➞ BT AUDIO ➞ TUNER‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪ "‪ "WAIT‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪"READY‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪) .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ(‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ "‪) "Samsung Home Theater‬ﻣﺴﺮﺡ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ "‪ "Connect‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫‪Connect‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫‪4/25/2008 9:17:28 PM‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ؟‬
‫ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) FUNCTION‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ "‪ "BT AUDIO‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪) .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﻳُﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪) PIN‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ ،PIN‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ >‪.<0000‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ SBC‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٢٣٧‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ٤٨/‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ SBC‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ )‪ ٣٢٨‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ٤٤٫١/‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫‪HT-X710_NO EUR(ARA)_0422.indd 38-39‬‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‪.,‬‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻭﺗﻤﺴﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪USB HOST‬‬
‫‪.2x ➞ 4x ➞ 8x ➞ 32x ➞ Normal‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ MP٣‬ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) STOP‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ( )‪. (‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺁﻣﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،USB‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻵﻣﻨﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) STOP‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ( )‪ (‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪.REMOVE USB‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪.USB Mass Storage V1.0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫)ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻘﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ ﻓﻲ ‪ Windows (2000‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ( ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ HDD : MP٣‬ﻭﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺑﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪USB Mass Storage v1.0‬‬
‫• ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻳﺸﻐّﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ ﻓﻲ ‪ Windows (2000‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ( ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ USB HDD‬ﻭ‪ : USB Flash Drive‬ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪ USB2.0‬ﺃﻭ ‪.USB1.1‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﺏ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB1.1‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ّ‬
‫• ﻟـ ‪ ،USB HDD‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ USB HDD‬ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ : USB‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫• ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.USB‬‬
‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،USB‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺘﺮﻑ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻣﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪JPG‬‬
‫‪JPG‬‬
‫‪.JPEG‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪٦٤٠x٤٨٠‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪MP٣‬‬
‫‪MP٣.‬‬
‫‪٣٨٤kbps~٨٠‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪٤٤٫١kHz‬‬
‫‪WMA‬‬
‫‪WMA.‬‬
‫‪١٢٨kbps~٥٦‬‬
‫‪V٨‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪٤٤٫١kHz‬‬
‫‪WMV‬‬
‫‪WMV.‬‬
‫‪٤Mbps‬‬
‫‪V٧,V٣,V٢,V١‬‬
‫‪٧٢٠x٤٨٠‬‬
‫‪٤٨KHz~٤٤٫١KHz‬‬
‫‪~DivX٣٫١١‬‬
‫‪XviD ,DivX٥٫١‬‬
‫‪٧٢٠x٤٨٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‪. # , $‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪، $‬‬
‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪،#‬‬
‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫‪4/25/2008 9:17:28 PM‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) FUNCTION‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪) PORT‬ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.USB‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻼﺷﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ USB MENU‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ‪.‬‬
‫‪Compatible Devices‬ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫‪AVI,.ASF.‬‬
‫‪٤Mbps‬‬
‫‪٤٨KHz~٤٤٫١KHz‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ) ‪.CBI (Control/Bulk/Interrupt‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ‪ PTP‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ NTFS‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪) FAT 16/32‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ (٣٢/١٦‬ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻴﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﻐّﻼﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻮﺝ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ USB HOST‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﻮﺝ ﻳﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺸﻐّﻞ ﻣﻊ ‪ Janus‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ )‪ : Media Transfer Protocol MTP‬ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ USB HOST‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻮﺝ ﻛﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ .USB‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٥٥‬‬
‫‪٤١‬‬
‫‪HT-X710_NO EUR(ARA)_0422.indd 40-41‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ )ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ‪ ،(٤:٣‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Cursor‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ( ‪ T‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ►‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Cursor‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ( ‪ T‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) TV DISPLAY‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ►‬
‫ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻐﺔ ‪) OSD‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻱ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ S,T‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) ENTER‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪) OSD‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻧﺠﻴﻠﻴﺰﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ ٤:٣LB‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٤:٣PS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ WIDE/HDTV‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻣﻠﻜﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺫﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫• ‪ : OTHERS‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) OTHERS‬ﺍﻵﺧﺮ( ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻟﺪﻭﻟﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٦‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ‪) AUDIO‬ﺍﻷﻭﺩﻳﻮ(‪) SUBTITLE ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻭ‪) DISC MENU‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‪.‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪( 4:3 Pan&Scan) 4:3PS‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ١٦:٩‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ Pan&Scan‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﻣﻊ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪.(١٦:٩‬‬
‫‪ ) ٤:٣LB‬ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ‪(4:3‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ١٦:٩‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪WIDE/HDTV‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ١٦:٩‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪4/25/2008 9:17:30 PM‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪SELECT‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﻫﻲ ‪ ،٤:٣‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻭﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻓﻬﻲ ‪ .١٦:٩‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : OSD LANGUAGE‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫• ‪ : AUDIO‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺩﻳﻮ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‬
‫• ‪ : SUBTITLE‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‬
‫• ‪ : DISC MENU‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‬
‫‪ a‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) RETURN‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ( ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) EXIT‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ( ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Language‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ► ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) RETURN‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ( ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) EXIT‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ( ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫● ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪ S,T‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) ENTER‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Cursor‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ( ‪ ٪‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ► ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Cursor‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ( ▲‪ ٪,‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪OSD Language‬‬
‫)ﻟﻐﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ► ‪.‬‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ،٤:٣‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻷﻥ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) Wide‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ( ﺁﻟﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫‪HT-X710_NO EUR(ARA)_0422.indd 42-43‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻱ )ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮ(‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،JPEG CD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻛﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺍﻫﻘﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) PAUSE‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ( ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺠﺒﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Cursor‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ( ‪ T‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ►‬
‫● ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) LOGO‬ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪) COPY LOGO DATA‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Cursor‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ( ‪ T‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) PARENTAL‬ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻱ(‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ►‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪ S,T‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪) ENTER‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ ،٦‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ ٧‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻱ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﻫﻘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ٣‬ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺭﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪COPY LOGO DATA‬‬
‫‪II PAUSE‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) ENTER‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ "‪ "7890‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺠﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪SELECT‬‬
‫‪LOGO IS COPIED‬‬
‫‪II PAUSE‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) RETURN‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ( ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) EXIT‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ( ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﻯ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻱ )ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Cursor‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ( ‪ T‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ►‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Cursor‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ( ‪ T‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ►‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Cursor‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ( ‪ T‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) PASSWORD‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ(‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ►‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) ENTER‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ ١٠٨٠i ،٧٢٠p HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ‪.١٠٨٠p‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Cursor‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ( ‪ T‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) LOGO‬ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ(‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ►‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) ENTER‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ S,T‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) USER‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ( ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) ENTER‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) EXIT‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ( ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : ORIGINAL‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﻛﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : USER‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻛﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪SELECT‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ "‪ "7890‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻵﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪SELECT‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) RETURN‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ( ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) EXIT‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ( ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) No Disc‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺯﺭ ‪) STOP‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ( )‪ (‬ﺑﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ INITIAL‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) POWER‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) RESET‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﻮ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫‪4/25/2008 9:17:33 PM‬‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫‪HT-X710_NO EUR(ARA)_0422.indd 44-45‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Cursor‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ( ‪ T‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪Audio‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ►‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD-Audio‬ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ DVD-Video‬ﻋﻼﻭﺓ ‪.DVD-Audio‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﺰء ‪ DVD-Viedo‬ﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ ،DVD-Audio‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.DVD-Video‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫● ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Cursor‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ( ‪ T‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪AV-SYNC‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ►‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Cursor‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ( ‪ T‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ►‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Cursor‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ( ‪ T‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) DVD TYPE‬ﻧﻮﻉ ‪(DVD‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ►‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺩﻳﻮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ S,T‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺄﺟﻴﻞ ‪ AV-SYNC‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪) ENTER‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺄﺟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﻣﺲ ﻭ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﺲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ S,T‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪) ENTER‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) RETURN‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ( ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) EXIT‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ( ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪SELECT‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ ٤ ~ ١‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.DVD AUDIO‬‬
‫• ‪ : DVD VIDEO‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪ DVD Video‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫‪.DVD Audio‬‬
‫• ‪ : DVD AUDIO‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ DVD Audio‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻭﺩﻳﻮ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Cursor‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ( ‪ T‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪Audio‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ►‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Cursor‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ( ‪ T‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪HDMI AUDIO‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ►‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ DVD Audio‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ DVD Audio‬ﺁﻟﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ S,T‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ON‬ﺃﻭ ‪ OFF‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪) ENTER‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪DivX(R‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻣﻊ ‪ DivX(R) Video‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑـ ‪www.divx.‬‬
‫‪com/vod‬‬
‫• ‪ : On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺩﻳﻮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻭﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Off‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻭﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﺒﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) RETURN‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ( ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) EXIT‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ( ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪) DRC‬ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻲ(‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﺩﻭﻟﺒﻲ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪SELECT‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﻮ ‪.HDMI Audio Off‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ HDMI AUDIO‬ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Cursor‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ( ‪ T‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪AUDIO‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ►‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪) SOUND EDIT‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Cursor‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ( ‪ T‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪DRC‬‬
‫)ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻲ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ►‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪S,T‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪) DRC‬ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻤﺴﻚ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ S‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻤﺴﻚ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫‪ T‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) RETURN‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ( ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) EXIT‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ( ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪CHANGE‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) SOUND EDIT‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪. W,X‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 00‬ﻭ‪ -06‬ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪.-6‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺳﺒﻮﻭﻓﺮ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ dB +6‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪.-6dB‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪ +6dB‬ﻭﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺘﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪.-6dB‬‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫‪4/25/2008 9:17:35 PM‬‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬
‫‪HT-X710_NO EUR(ARA)_0422.indd 46-47‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) TUNER‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺍﻟﻒ( ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪.FM‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) MUTE‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻳﺤﺔ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ‪ : ١‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‪#,$‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ‪ : ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺯﺭ ‪.,,‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‪ .,,‬ﺑﺎﻹﻳﺠﺎﺯ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻳﺤﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ‪ MUTE‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) MUTE‬ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻳﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) FUNCTION‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ( ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪.FM‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ‪ : ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) STOP‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ( )‪(‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) PRESET‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ‪ #,$‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪STOP‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ‪ : ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫)‪(‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) MANUAL‬ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪ #,$‬ﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) STOP‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ( )‪ (‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) MANUAL‬ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‪ #,$‬ﺑﺎﻹﻳﺠﺎﺯ ﻟﻤﺆﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) MO/ST‬ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ( ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ STEREO‬ﻭ‪ MONO‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) MONO‬ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ﻟﻠﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟـ ‪ FM 89.10‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) TUNER‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺍﻟﻒ( ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪.FM‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‪.,,‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.89.10‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) TUNER MEMORY‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺍﻟﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ ٠١‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ #,$‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 1‬ﻭ‪.15‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) TUNER MEMORY‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺍﻟﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) TUNER MEMORY‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) SLEEP‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ .SLEEP‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ➞ ‪➞ 10 ➞ 20 ➞ 30 ➞ 60 ➞ 90 ➞ 120 ➞ 150‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) SLEEP‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻐﻴّﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) SLEEP‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ OFF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺼﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻀﺎﻳﻘﺘﻚ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) DIMMER‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) V-SOUND‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺠﺴﻢ(‬
‫ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ – ‪ 2‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻌﻮﺭ ﻛﺄﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪.5.1‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) V-SOUND‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺠﺴﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪V-SO ON ➞ V-SO OFF‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪.5‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﺆﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ #,$‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪٤٨‬‬
‫‪4/25/2008 9:17:40 PM‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺑﺚ ‪.AM‬‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫‪HT-X710_NO EUR(ARA)_0422.indd 48-49‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻳﺤﺔ‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫‪) S.VOL‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺿﺨﻢ(‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﺘﻈﻢ ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺿﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) S.VOL‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺿﺨﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ )‪) (Ф ٣٫٥‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ( ﻟﺮﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪٥٫١‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪SVOL OFF ← SVOL ON‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.V-H/P‬‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ V.HP:ON‬ﻭ‪.V.HP:OFF‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻳﺤﺔ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺻﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﻬﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬
‫• ‪ : V.HP:ON‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪ ٥٫١‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻄﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻌﻮﺭ ﻛﺄﻧﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : V.HP:OFF‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻘﻨﺎﺓ – ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﻬﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪P.BASS/AUDIO UPSCALE‬‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﻬﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ( ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) P.BASS‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﻬﻴﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪P BAS ON ➞ UPSC ON ➞ OFF‬‬
‫‪IN1‬‬
‫‪AUX‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪.(mp3‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ً‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪ ٢٤) MP3‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ٨ ،‬ﺑﺖ( ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ ٤٤٫١) CD‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ١٦ ،‬ﺑﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪P.BASS/AUDIO UPSCALE‬‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﻬﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ( ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪AUDIO UPSCALE‬‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪P BAS ON ➞ UPSC ON ➞ OFF‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬
‫‪4/25/2008 9:17:43 PM‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ‪ LPCM‬ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ mp3، Divx، cd‬ﻭ‪.wma‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) P.BASS‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﻬﻴﺮ( ﻟﺘﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "POWER BASS ON‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥١‬‬
‫‪HT-X710_NO EUR(ARA)_0422.indd 50-51‬‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺠﺪ ﺣﻼ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺼﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺴﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫• ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺝ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ؟‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺷﻐّﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻻ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ‪ CD-ROM‬ﻭ‪.DVD-ROM‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻴﻐﻞ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪PLAY/‬‬
‫‪.PAUSE‬‬
‫• ﻫﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻗﺮﺻﺎ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺪﻭﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺤﻪ؟‬
‫• ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻻ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "‪ "NO DISC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪)STOP‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ) ‪ (‬ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ "‪"INITIIAL‬‬
‫)ﺃﻭﻟﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) POWER‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) RESET‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ( ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻤﺤﻮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻭﺧﺰﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ؟‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﻛّﺐ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪ FM‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ؟ ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ؟‬
‫• ﻫﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺿﺮﺭ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ؟‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻞ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ؟‬
‫• ﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪﺓ؟‬
‫• ﻫﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ )‪ (TV/DVD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )‪ TV‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (DVD‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ؟‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻭﺭ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ؟‬
‫• ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻭﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻮﺍﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ؟‬
‫• ﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﺘﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻒ؟‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻐّﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺳﻴﺊ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺩﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺩﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ؟‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD ١٦:٩‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،WIDE ١٦:٩‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪LETTER ٤:٣‬‬
‫‪ ،BOX‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،PAN SCAN ٤:٣‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ DVD ٤:٣‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ٤:٣‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪) .‬ﻣﺜﻼ ‪ :‬ﺗﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻏﺮﻳﺐ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺯﺭ ‪) () STOP‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻮﻣﺾ ‪ STAND BY RED LED‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) RESET‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ( ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻤﺤﻮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻭﺧﺰﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٢‬‬
‫‪4/25/2008 9:17:45 PM‬‬
‫‪٥٣‬‬
‫‪HT-X710_NO EUR(ARA)_0422.indd 52-53‬‬
ARA
USB Host ‫ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
(‫“ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬Disc Menu”‫“ )ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ( ﻭ‬Disc Subtitle” ،(‫“ )ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬Disc Audio” ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬
.(٤٢ ‫)ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
LANGUAGE CODE LIST ●
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
Olympus
Olympus
Olympus
Olympus
Olympus
Olympus
Panasonic
Panasonic
Panasonic
Panasonic
Pentax
Pentax
Pentax
Pentax
Samsung
Samsung
Toshiba
Nikon
Nikon
Nikon
Panasonic
Minolta
Olympus
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
U300
X-350
C-760
C-5060
X1
U-mini
Lumix-FZ20
DMC-FX7GD
Lumix LC33
LUMIX DMC-F1
Optio-S40
Optio-S50
Optio 33LF
Optio MX
Digimax-420
Digimax-400
Sora PDR-T30
Coolpix 5900
Coolpix S1
Coolpix 7600
DMC-FX7
Dimage Xt
AZ-1
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
Digital Camera
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
Fuji
Fuji
Fuji
Fuji
Fuji
Fuji
Konica
Kyocera
Kyocera
Kyocera
Kyocera
Minolta
Minolta
Minolta
Nikon
Nikon
Nikon
Nikon
Nikon
Nikon
Nikon
Olympus
Olympus
Olympus
Finepix-A340
Finepix-F810
Finepix-F610
Finepix-f450
Finepix S7000
Finepix A310
KD-310Z
Finecam SL300R
Finecam SL400R
Finecam S5R
Finecam Xt
Dimage-Z1
Dimage Z1
Dimage X21
Coolpix4200
Coolpix4300
Coolpix 2200
Coolpix 3500
Coolpix 3700
Coolpix 4100
Coolpix 5200
Stylus 410 digital
300-digital
300-digital
USB FLASH ‫ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
USB 2.0 128M
USB 2.0 128M
USB 2.0 64M
USB 2.0 64M
USB 2.0 64M
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
LG
Iomega
Imation
(XTICK(M
EZDrive
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
XTICK
Micro Mini
iFlash
LG
RiDATA
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
USB 2.0 USB Flash Drive 128M
USB 2.0 128M
USB 2.0 256M
USB 2.0 64MB
USB 2.0 32MB
USB 2.0 128MB
Sandisk
Sandisk
Sandisk
Sony
Serotech
A.L tech
Cruzer Micro
Cruzer Mini
Cruzer Mini
SONY Micro Vault
FLEX DRIVE
AnyDrive
MP3 ‫ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
MP3 Player
MP3 Player
MP3 Player
MP3 Player
MP3 Player
HDD MP3 Player
256MB MP3 Player
MP3 Player
MP3 Player
256MB MP3 Player
Samsung
Samsung
Samsung
Cowon
Cowon
Cowon
Sharp
Iriver
Samsung
Samsung
٥٥
HT-X710_NO EUR(ARA)_0422.indd 54-55
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
YP-780
YP-35
YP-55
iAUDIO U2
iAUDIO G3
iAudio M3
SI-M500L
H10
YP-T5 VB
YP-53
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
MB MP3 Player 128
20G HDD MP3 Player
20G HDD MP3 Player
MP3 Player
MP3 Player
MP3 Player
MP3 Player
MP3 Player
MP3 Player
MP3 Player
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
Creative
Iriver
Samsung
Samsung
Samsung
Samsung
Samsung
Samsung
Samsung
Samsung
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
Creative MuVo NX128M
Iriver H320
YH-920
YP-T7
YP-MT6
YP-T6
YP-53
YP-ST5
YP-T5
YP-60
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
Slovenian
1506
Latvian, Lettish
1334
Frisian
1181
Afar
1027
Samoan
1507
Malagasy
1345
Irish
1183
Abkhazian
1028
Shona
1508
Maori
1347
Scots Gaelic
1186
Afrikaans
1032
Somali
1509
Macedonian
1349
Galician
1194
Amharic
1039
Albanian
1511
Malayalam
1350
Guarani
1196
Arabic
1044
Serbian
1512
Mongolian
1352
Gujarati
1203
Assamese
1045
Siswati
1513
Moldavian
1353
Hausa
1209
Aymara
1051
Sesotho
1514
Marathi
1356
Hindi
1217
Azerbaijani
1052
Sundanese
1515
Malay
1357
Croatian
1226
Bashkir
1053
Swedish
1516
Maltese
1358
Hungarian
1229
Byelorussian
1057
Swahili
1517
Burmese
1363
Armenian
1233
Bulgarian
1059
Tamil
1521
Nauru
1365
Interlingua
1235
Bihari
1060
Tegulu
1525
Nepali
1369
Interlingue
1239
Bislama
1069
Tajik
1527
Dutch
1376
Inupiak
1245
Bengali; Bangla
1066
Thai
1528
Norwegian
1379
Indonesian
1248
Tibetan
1067
Tigrinya
1529
Occitan
1393
Icelandic
1253
Breton
1070
Turkmen
1531
Afan) Oromo)
1403
Italian
1254
Catalan
1079
Tagalog
1532
Oriya
1408
Hebrew
1257
Corsican
1093
Setswana
1534
Punjabi
1417
Japanese
1261
Czech
1097
Tonga
1535
Polish
1428
Yiddish
1269
Welsh
1103
Turkish
1538
Pashto, Pushto
1435
Javanese
1283
Danish
1105
Tsonga
1539
Portuguese
1436
Georgian
1287
German
1109
Tatar
1540
Quechua
1463
Kazakh
1297
Bhutani
1130
Twi
1543
Rhaeto-Romance
1481
Greenlandic
1298
Greek
1142
Ukrainian
1557
Kirundi
1482
Cambodian
1299
English
1144
Urdu
1564
Romanian
1483
Kannada
1300
Esperanto
1145
Uzbek
1572
Russian
1489
Korean
1301
Spanish
1149
Vietnamese
1581
Kinyarwanda
1491
Kashmiri
1305
Estonian
1150
Volapuk
1587
Sanskrit
1495
Kurdish
1307
Basque
1151
Wolof
1613
Sindhi
1498
Kirghiz
1311
Persian
1157
Xhosa
1632
Sangro
1501
Latin
1313
Finnish
1165
Yoruba
1665
Serbo-Croatian
1502
Lingala
1326
Fiji
1166
Chinese
1684
Singhalese
1503
Laothian
1327
Faeroese
1171
Zulu
1697
Slovak
1505
Lithuanian
1332
French
1174
٥٤
4/25/2008 9:17:45 PM
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻃﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺪ ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺑﺼﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺒﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻻﺻﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪) DVD‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﺎﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١٢ : CD‬ﺳﻢ )ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ(‬
‫‪ ٨ : CD‬ﺳﻢ )ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ(‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﻈﻴﻒ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺰّﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‬
‫‪) HDMI‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫‪٢٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ~‪٢٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء‬
‫‪٧٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫‪٦٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﻜﺴﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫)‪٤٠٠mV (AUX‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺨﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻈﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻄﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺠﺪ ﺑﺼﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺒﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ّ ،‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻻﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺊ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ x‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ x‬ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ٩٠ :‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ ٤٫٢‬ﻛﻠﺞ‬
‫‪) ٤٤٩٫٦‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ‪) ٢٥١٫٥ x‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪) ٩٩٫١ x‬ﻋﻤﻖ( ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫‪C°٣٥+~C°٥+‬‬
‫‪٪ ٧٥ ~ ٪ ١٠‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ‪ ٤٫٠٦ ~ ٣٫٤٩ :‬ﻡ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ( ‪ ١٣٥ :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ‪ ٥٫٦ ~ ٤٫٨ :‬ﻡ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ٧٤ :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ‪ ٥٫٦ ~ ٤٫٨ :‬ﻡ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ٢٠ :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪) ١٫٠Vp-p‬ﺣﻤﻞ ‪،(٧٥‬‬
‫‪) ١٫٠Vp-p : Y‬ﺣﻤﻞ ‪،(Ω ٧٥‬‬
‫‪) Vp-p ٠٫٧٠ : Pr‬ﺣﻤﻞ ‪(Ω ٧٥‬‬
‫‪) Vp-p ٠٫٧٠ : Pb‬ﺣﻤﻞ ‪(Ω ٧٥‬‬
‫‪Ω ١١٥~٨٥ :Impedance‬‬
‫‪١٣٣‬ﻭﺍﻁ ‪(٣Ω)٢ X‬‬
‫‪١٣٥‬ﻭﺍﻁ)‪(٣Ω‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪2.1‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫‪Ω٣‬‬
‫‪Ω٣‬‬
‫‪ ٣٥‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ~ ‪ ١٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ ١٤٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ~ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪٨٦‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫‪٨٦‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫‪١٣٥‬ﻭﺍﻁ‬
‫‪١٣٣‬ﻭﺍﻁ‬
‫‪٢٧٠‬ﻭﺍﻁ‬
‫‪٢٦٦‬ﻭﺍﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ‪ ١٠٢ x ٥٣٧ x ٩٦ :‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ‪(١٩٠ Ф :‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪ ٤١٢ x ٣٦٢ x ٢١٧ :‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ‪ ٢٫٢ :‬ﻛﻠﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪ ٦٫٧ :‬ﻛﻠﺞ‬
‫*‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻛﻠﻲ‬
‫ ‪ -‬ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd‬ﺑﺤﻖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫‪4/25/2008 9:17:46 PM‬‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫‪HT-X710_NO EUR(ARA)_0422.indd 56-57‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ‬
.‫ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﻟﻠﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ‬،‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻱ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‬
Web Site
www.samsung.com/ca
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/ar
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/cl
Country
Region
www.samsung.com/dk
www.samsung.com/fi
(1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864
(01-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864
(1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864
0800-333-3733
4004-0000 , 0800-124-421
(800-SAMSUNG(726-7864
00-1800-5077267
800-7919267
0-800-507-7267
1-800-10-7267
800-6225
1-800-299-0013
1-800-234-7267
800-7267
1-800-682-3180
1-800-751-2676
(1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864
0-800-100-5303
01-8000112112
18 24 201 2(0) 0032
844 000 844
:Distributor pro Českou republiku
Samsung Zrt., česka organizační složka
Vyskočilova 4, 14000 Praha 4
70 19 70 70
515 030-6227
www.samsung.com
,(SAMSUNG (€ 0,15/Min 3260
(Min/0,15 €) 65 65 08 25 08
FRANCE
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/be
www.samsung.com/nl
www.samsung.com/no
www.samsung.com/pl
www.samsung.com/pt
www.samsung.com/sk
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/se
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/ie
www.samsung.com/at
www.samsung.com/ch
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.kz
www.samsung.uz
(SAMSUNG(726-7864) (€ 0,14/Min - 01805
(06-80-SAMSUNG(726-7864
(800-SAMSUNG(726-7864
710 03 261 2(0) 0035
(0900-SAMSUNG(726-7864) (€ 0,10/Min
480 815-56
022-607-93-33 , 881 801 801 0
(80820-SAMSUNG(726-7864
(0800-SAMSUNG(726-7864
30 11 10 902
200 0771-400
(SAMSUNG (7267864 0845
100 717 0818
(0800-SAMSUNG(726-7864
(0800-SAMSUNG(726-7864
8-800-555-55-55
8-10-800-500-55-500
8-10-800-500-55-500
00-800-500-55-500
8-10-800-500-55-500
8-800-502-0000
8-800-77777
800-7267
800-7267
603 362 1300
(0800SAMSUNG(726-7864
1880 010-6475 , 800-810-5858
3698-4698
110011 1800 , 8282 3030
0800-112-8888
0120-327-527
1800-88-9999
(1800-10-SAMSUNG(726-7864
(1800-SAMSUNG(726-7864
02-689-3232 , 1800-29-3232
0800-329-999
889 588 800 1
11 77 444
( 0860-SAMSUNG(726-7864
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864), 8000-4726
GERMANY
HUNGARY
ITALIA
LUXEMBURG
NETHERLANDS
NORWAY
POLAND
PORTUGAL
SLOVAKIA
SPAIN
SWEDEN
U.K
EIRE
AUSTRIA
SWITZERLAND
RUSSIA
KAZAHSTAN
UZBEKISTAN
KYRGYZSTAN
TADJIKISTAN
UKRAINE
LITHUANIA
LATVIA
ESTONIA
AUSTRALIA
NEW ZEALAND
CHINA
HONG KONG
INDIA
INDONESIA
JAPAN
MALAYSIA
PHILIPPINES
SINGAPORE
THAILAND
TAIWAN
VIETNAM
TURKEY
SOUTH AFRICA
U.A.E
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com.co
www.samsung.com/be
www.samsung.com/cz
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.lt
www.samsung.com/lv
www.samsung.ee
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/nz
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/hk
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/jp
www.samsung.com/my
www.samsung.com/ph
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/tw
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
HT-X710_NO EUR(ARA)_0422.indd 58-59
Customer Care Center CANADA
MEXICO
U.S.A
ARGENTINE
BRAZIL
CHILE
NICARAGUA
HONDURAS
COSTA RICA
ECUADOR
EL SALVADOR
GUATEMALA
JAMAICA
PANAMA
PUERTO RICO
REP. DOMINICA
TRINIDAD & TOBAGO
VENEZUELA
COLOMBIA
BELGIUM
North America
Latin America
CZECH REPUBLIC
DENMARK
FINLAND
Europe
CIS
Asia Pacific
& Middle East
Africa
4/25/2008 9:17:47 PM
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising